JP2019141185A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that allows a player to feel the significance of continuous operation by himself/herself.SOLUTION: When executing a meter performance as a specific performance on the basis of detection and determination of self-continuous hitting, a specific stage of a meter value in which a performance mode of the meter performance can be changed to the maximum is increased (level L10), compared to when executing the meter performance on the basis of determination of automatic consecutive hitting (level L5).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22-5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, a detection means capable of detecting a player's movement such as a push button is provided, and a continuous hitting effect that advances the stage in response to detection of a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous movement of the player There was something that advanced the production such as. In such a gaming machine, when a player's action different from a continuous action such as a long push operation of a push button is detected, it is regarded as an automatic continuous hit, which is regarded as a continuous hit operation being executed at a predetermined interval. Depending on the situation, there is one that advances effects such as repeated striking effects (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-180364 A (paragraph 0138 etc.)

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, in a specific state, the player's own continuous action and the player's own continuous action, even though the player operated faster than the deemed continuous action. In the deemed continuous motion, the progress of the production did not change according to the motion detection. As a result, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot feel the significance of continuous operation by himself.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player feel the significance of continuous operation by himself.

(1) A gaming machine capable of playing games (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Detecting means (push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the player's movement;
Specific display means (image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, S261FS013 in FIG. 22-6, S172 in FIG. 7, etc.) for displaying a specific display (meter image 261F001, etc.);
Based on the fact that a predetermined action of the player, which is different from the continuous action of the player (such as self-strike), is detected by the detecting means during the detection valid period of the detecting means, it is considered that the continuous action is executed at a predetermined interval. (Determined as automatic continuous hitting, etc.) operation determination means (determination control CPU 120, S261FS024 in FIG. 22-7, etc.) for determining continuous operation,
Based on the player's continuous motion (such as self-strikes) detected by the detecting means during the detection valid period, the specific display effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the continuous motion (FIG. 22-). 2 (A) and the like) and a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120, S261FS026 in FIG. 22-7, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (such as a meter effect at the time of self-strike),
The specific effect execution means further sets the specific display effect mode in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation at a predetermined interval (automatic continuous hitting, etc.) based on the determination that the motion determination means regards the continuous motion. It is possible to execute a specific effect (such as a meter effect at the time of automatic hitting) that can be changed (FIG. 22-2 (B), etc.) (S261FS025 of FIG. 22-7, etc.)
The specific effect executing means is configured so that the detection means performs the player's action at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous motion deemed determination than when the specific effect is performed based on the determination that the continuous motion is deemed to be determined. When the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous motion, the specific stage at which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is higher (as shown in FIGS. 22-2 (A) and (B)). Thus, the maximum change level of the meter production is higher when the self-strike is performed than when the automatic repetitive strike is performed).
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the fact that the detection means detects the continuous action of the player at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous action deemed determination. Compared with the case where the specific effect is executed based on the deemed determination, the specific stage at which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is increased (see FIGS. 22-2 (A) and (B)). Thus, the maximum change level of the meter production is higher when the self-strike is performed than when the automatic repetitive strike is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the significance of continuous operation by himself.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The specific effect can be developed into a plurality of types of predetermined effect modes (first development effect, second development effect, special development effect, etc.) (FIG. 22-1).
Within the detection effective period, when the specific display effect mode reaches a predetermined stage (level L5) and when the specific display effect mode reaches the specific stage (level L10) The type of the predetermined stage of development of the stage of the different stage is different (as shown in FIGS. 22-1 (B) and (C), the first development stage can be shifted when the level L5 is reached, and the second stage stage transition is reached when the level L10 is reached. Possible).

  According to such a structure, it can promote that a player performs continuous operation | movement by oneself.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The specific effect execution means can cause the effect mode of the specific display to reach a special stage (level MAX) higher than the specific stage based on the establishment of special conditions (such as big hit determination) (FIG. 22-). 1 (D), etc. (can be shifted to special development effects upon reaching level MAX) (FIGS. 22-4 (A), (B), FIGS. 22-5 (B), (D), etc.)
The special stage is an effect mode that is not reachable when the specific effect is executed based on the detection means detecting the continuous motion of the player at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous motion deemed determination. (As shown in FIGS. 22-5 (A) and (C), if the production pattern that reaches the level MAX is not determined, the level MAX cannot be reached even if the player hits himself / herself at high speed).

  According to such a configuration, when the special condition is not satisfied, even if the player operates continuously at high speed by himself, the game machine reaches the special stage so that it cannot reach the special stage. It is possible to determine the stage of possible production modes.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3),
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the continuous operation at the predetermined interval based on the determination that the continuous motion is determined based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. The stage can be reached (as shown in FIGS. 22-5 (B) and (D), if an effect pattern that reaches the level MAX is determined, the level MAX can be reached even if automatic continuous hitting is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player who performs the continuous operation based on the determination that the continuous operation is regarded as being deteriorated.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4),
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific condition is satisfied (when the meter display is insufficient in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7, etc.), the effect that finally causes the specific display effect mode to reach the specific stage is executed. (Meter display adjustment effect in S261FS029 in FIG. 22-7),
When the specific condition is satisfied, before the execution of the effect of finally causing the specific display effect mode to reach the specific stage, when the specific display effect mode has not reached the specific stage, Based on the detection of a specific action (such as a tilting action of the stick controller 31A) that is different from the continuous action of the player, based on the degree of change in the specific display effect mode according to the player's continuous action (such as continuous hitting action) Furthermore, it is possible to execute an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific display with a high degree of change (FIGS. 22-8 (B), (C), etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, the stage is changed too much when executing the effect that finally causes the specific display effect mode to reach the specific stage in the specific effect. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to produce a sense of incongruity in the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display by the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display based on the detection of the specific action different from the continuous action of the player. it can.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5),
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (CPU 120 for effect control, etc.),
Title notification means (such as CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when the suggestion effect is executed.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6),
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (8),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9),
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(11) In any one of the gaming machines (6) to (10),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (11),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)),
An operational effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(13) In any one of the gaming machines (6) to (12),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (a second title reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) (for example, an image) A display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120),
The display means includes
Plural types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) A specific image (including a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), (B) is the explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows a part of game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display monitor in the modification 4, and the display content of this display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor in the modification 4, and the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-6) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit suggestion effect determination table, an accessory effect determination table, and a light-guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows an example of meter production. It is a timing chart which shows the detection determination and meter display change in each of self-strike and auto-strike. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is a figure which shows a special development effect selection table in a table format. It is a figure which shows an expansion effect pattern selection table in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous striking effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous striking effect process. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows the example which performs a meter display adjustment effect based on a player performing specific operation | movement different from repeated hitting. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows an example of multiple specific image display effect. Period-specific effect control in which the effect executed when the push button operation is not detected within the effective period of the first and second stages of the effect period during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special symbol is executed. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus which shows. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation pattern selection table used in the latter period of production | generation control according to a period in a table | surface form. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd continuous striking effect process.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, etc.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets the interruption prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern and the type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the non-reach losing fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , The variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative pattern variable display mode is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”, and the display result is “big hit” Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability when each reach is executed (the jackpot reliability) is as follows: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 8A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of super reach production operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop and become a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part until the notification is made, a super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 9I, the contents of the effects common to those in FIG. 9C (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part on the upper left of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9D, 9F, 9D). H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title notifications with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying an expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and it corresponds to the expected level. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect and improve the effect. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 10D. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and executed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the figure, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK008. An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. However, there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation presentation when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  In FIG. 12, although the example of the production | presentation operation | movement when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated is shown, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) by production mode (state when reach production is performed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of increasing the number of black stars stepwise is completed, the button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8 to notify the Super Reach A title. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and are in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17C to 17F and FIGS. 18G to 18I, a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination related to the shutter effect (whether the shutter effect is present or the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part of this embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part of this Embodiment is demonstrated. First, as shown in FIG. 20-1 and FIG. 20-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 105SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 105SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 includes a glass door frame 105SG003a having a glass window between a door opening position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened around the left side and a door closing position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 105SG003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 105SG003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 105SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 has a lock switch 105SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (playing rate), which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 105SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052, is housed in the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 105SG201.

  Since the board case 105SG201 having the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the lock switch 105SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. Further, the lock switch 105SG051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation, which will be described later, and an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation by using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by a single key.

  The substrate case 105SG201 is provided with a display monitor 105SG029 and a display changeover switch 105SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 105SG029. The display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left part of the board case 105SG201. That is, the display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are arranged on the front surface when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized in the substrate case 105SG201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in this embodiment cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end of the outer frame 105SG001a includes a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. A security cover 105SG500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 from the back side is attached. This security cover 105SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 105SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 105SG500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 105SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 105SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 105SG201. Security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 105SG001a via the front end of short piece 105SG500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 105SG500Ab contacts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 105SG201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 become inoperable by the long piece 105SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 to move from the long piece 105SG500Ab. By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 105SG500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A restricts the operation on the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 105SG500A described above is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 105SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. Unless the game shop clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003 with a door key, the set value cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A lock switch 105SG051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is inserted by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell board from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a gaming device such as a card unit installed between And the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be manipulated to change the setting value. Therefore, the security cover 105SG500A and the lock switch 105SG051 change over the setting when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. Regulations restricting operation on the operation unit including the switch 105SG052 By being maintained state, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered by the security cover 105SG500A, Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 105SG201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern determining randomness Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In the present embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are exemplified as values in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach lose variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β that are the super reach fluctuation patterns. Has been. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is set to “hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set higher. In the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, these variation patterns are determined after the variation pattern type is first determined, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, or the like. The variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the selected type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the variation is determined from the random value for determining the variation pattern type. After the pattern type is determined first, the variation pattern to be executed is determined from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type. It may be so.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 20-5, although the variation content (effect content) is previously determined for every variation pattern, this invention is limited to this. Instead, the variation content (effect content) may be different even for the same variation pattern according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern is a normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a change pattern that causes super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 20-6 and FIG. 20-7 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) In addition to a table (for the second special symbol), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table (not shown), a general drawing display result determination table (not shown) A general variation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probabilities (the winning rate) for the big hit and the small hit change according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (the winning rate) for the big hit and the small hit is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the highest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIG. 20-6 (A) to FIG. 20-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state, a big win is won with a probability of 1/99. While the decision value is set to win the jackpot with a probability of 50, if the gaming state is probabilistic, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1 / 9.9 and the jackpot with a probability of 1/50 Judgment value is set to win.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the gaming state is a normal state or a short-time state, the player wins a big hit with a probability of 1/150. While the decision value is set to win the jackpot with a probability of 1/99, if the gaming state is probabilistic, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/15 and the jackpot with a probability of 1/99. Judgment value is set to win.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200. On the other hand, if the game state is a probabilistic change state, the determination value is set so that the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/20. When the setting value is 3, the determination value is set so that the small hit is not won.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state, when the set value is “1”, the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is high, and the set value is “3”. The determination value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small win is the lowest. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, the case where the set value is “1” has the highest probability of winning a big or small hit, and the set value is “3”. The determination value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small win is the lowest.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (C). If it matches one of the hit determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Further, determining whether or not to win a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is a big hit symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to determine whether or not the stop symbol at is to be a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 20-6 (C) is used, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the determination value corresponding to the small hit. Is not set, that is, small hits were not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as a judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won You may do it. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In this embodiment, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, only one of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be made different.

  FIGS. 20-7 (A) and 20-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. It is. Among these, FIG. 20-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. Also, in FIG. 20-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Table.

  The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20-8. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control (probability change control) and time-shortening control after the jackpot gaming state ends. Is set to the big hit B or big hit C that shifts to the high-accuracy and high base state, and the variable hit A that shifts to the low-accuracy and high-base state by executing only the short-time control after the big hit gaming state ends. .

  The big hit gaming state by “hit A” is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit gaming state by “big hit B” is a normal open big hit which is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by “big hit C” is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit gaming state of the big hit B or the big hit C is continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, when the big hit that is generated again is the big hit B or big hit C, since the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. The so-called villa state occurs.

  On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by the “big hit A” is that a special number game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) or the predetermined number of special figure games. The game is ended by being in a big hit gaming state before is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 150 are assigned to jackpot A, 151 to 200 are assigned to jackpot B, and 201 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is “2”, in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, and 151 to 250 are assigned to the big hit B, 251 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, and 151 to 275 are assigned to the big hit B out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299. 276 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, 151 to 160 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 161 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 is assigned to the jackpot A from 0 to 150, and 151 to 170 is assigned to the jackpot B. 171 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 150 are assigned to the big hit A, and 151 to 180 are assigned to the big hit B. 181 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol and when the big bonus occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “big hit A” is the same Is set to Furthermore, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol at the same set value, the big hit type is determined to be “big hit C” than when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. In addition to the high ratio, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “big hit C” when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol is set to decrease in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. .

  In the present embodiment, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “big hit A” is the same for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Regardless of the embodiment, the probability variation continuation rate (ream rate) is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation continuation rate (for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) The recreational rate may be different.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed after the big hit game is finished by determining the big hit type as “big hit B” or “big hit C” when the fluctuation display result is a big hit. While the control and time-shortening control are executed, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the big hit type is determined to be “hit A”, so that only the short-time control is executed after the big hit game ends. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that when the variation display result is a big hit, the probability variation control and the time reduction control are performed over a predetermined number of variation displays regardless of the big hit type. It is good also as what is performed (what is called a frequency cut probability change machine).

  However, in such pachinko gaming machines that are cut in such a number of times, it is conceivable that the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) differs by changing the jackpot probability for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. When the number of pachinko gaming machines that are cut off is set to be different from the jackpot probability for each set value, the number of times of probability change control and short-time control executed after the jackpot game is finished so that the probability change continuation rate (ream) rate is the same. May be different.

  In other words, in the set values 1 to 3, the ratio at which both the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are implemented after the end of the big hit game (the ratio at which only the short-time control is performed) is the first special regardless of the set value. While the big win in the symbol special symbol game is the same as the case in which the big bonus occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the big hit type is determined to be “big hit C” with 16 rounds big hit The ratio is highest when the set value is 1, and is lowest when the set value is 3 (ratio where the big hit type is determined as “big hit C”: setting 1> setting 2> setting 3). That is, the ratio that is determined to be “big hit B” in which the big hit type is five round big hit is the highest when the set value is 3, and the lowest when the set value is 1 (the big hit type is “big hit B”) The ratio determined by: setting 3> setting 2> setting 1). From the above, regarding the payout rate, the set value 1 has the highest payout rate, and the set value 3 has the lowest payout rate.

  The present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value that has been set, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at different ratios from the big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or a plurality of jackpot types that are not determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C depending on the set value. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot according to the set value that has been set is different, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. .

  In this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability or the small hit probability is increased, or the big hit C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameability itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. ing.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) that are used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), the variation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the big hit for super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that can be taken by the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges from 0 to 997. Up to 300 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  As shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges 0 to 997. 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit, and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit.

  Thus, when the big hit A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit Higher and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the big hit B or big hit C is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the big hit type “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In such a case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player who may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the sense of expectation.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value out of a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits is a determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, even if the set value is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”, Of the judgment value ranges 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small hit variation pattern. The small hit variation pattern may be determined from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios with the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”.

  The loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time reduction control, and a low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without reduction, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIG. 20-10 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base medium sum storage number), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Of the range 0-997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-10 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 500 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-10 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for the low base medium sum storage number 5 or more), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Of the range 0-997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, and 551 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  In the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss, out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 20-10 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base medium), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, and 551 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Thus, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that for determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes lower in order of 3. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, regardless of the variation pattern determining table, among the determination values, 701 to 900 are the variation pattern of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

  The “common determination ratio” in the present embodiment is the same as the determination ratio at different setting values (this embodiment) as well as the determination ratio being the same at different setting values. (For example, between the set value 1 and the set value 3, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%).

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratios of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value that has been set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the super-reach β loss variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value that has been set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value that is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern per super reach jackpot may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach fluctuation patterns differs according to the set value that is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undecided variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value is that any variation pattern is not determined (the determination proportion is 0%) or a specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine at a rate of

  As shown in FIG. 20-10, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1). The non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variation time than -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach loss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, the winning prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening with a long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (A) to 20-10 (C), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table for loss that differs depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is reserved) In the case of executing the variable display of the number of memories and the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for losing that varies depending on the number of the second special symbols to be stored.

  In addition, in each variation pattern determination table for losing of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach losing And the range of random number values assigned to PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the change display is actually executed in the change pattern of the super reach lose (the change pattern of the super reach lose) (Appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the mode in which the change display is executed in accordance with the change pattern of the super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified. It is not limited to the above. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the change display is the same pattern regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 with the change pattern of the super reach loss It may be executed.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-11, after executing the initialization process (step S8) in the aforementioned game control main process (see FIG. 3), the CPU 103 It is determined whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12). When the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12; Yes), a setting change process (step 105SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa14.

  Then, after executing the setting change process (step 105SGSa13), after executing step S7, when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa11; No), when the door opening sensor 105SG090 is OFF (step 105SGSa12; No) ) Reads out the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 105SGSa14, sets the read set value as the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processes in and after step S10.

  FIG. 20-12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. In this setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies a setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (step S105SGSa21), and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 105SG029 (step S105SGSa22).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 (step 105SGSa23). When the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is not operated (step 105SGSa23; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. When the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated (step 105SGSa23; Yes), the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is set. Update display is performed (step S105SGSa24), and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. In the process of step S105SGSa24, for example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to “2” and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. When “2” is displayed, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to “3”, and when “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is changed to “3”. “1” may be updated and displayed.

  In step 105SGSa25, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 has been pressed. When the lock switch 105SG051 is not pushed (step 105SGSa25; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa23, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed (step 105SGSa25; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG0029 is set. At the same time (step 105SGSa26), the specified setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated with respect to the already stored setting value) (step 105SGSa27). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28; Yes), the process of step 105SGSa28 is repeatedly executed. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa28; No), the setting change process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG051 being ON (setting change processing is performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be executed according to the combination of ON / OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, recovery processing from power interruption (recovery processing shown in FIG. 3). Should be executed. During execution of the setting change processing and setting confirmation processing described above, special symbol variation display, game ball launch, whether or not the variation display result is a big hit, various lotteries such as jackpot type, prize ball payout, etc. It is only necessary to be controlled in a game stop state in which no processing is performed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (A) and FIG. 20-13 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 105SG051 is turned on. And the setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103 on condition that the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened), and the display monitor 105SG029 backs up the RAM 102 The set value stored in the area is displayed.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 as described above, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (E), the CPU 103 detects the push operation of the lock switch 105SG051 by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, and then sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the RAM 102. Store (update storage) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 105SG029 to notify the store clerk of the game hall that a new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-13 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the big prize opening is opened again. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the fact that the lock switch 105SG051 is turned off by an operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, and is in a state where the game is possible, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, The decision lottery, prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process according to the present embodiment, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“1” in this embodiment), or the most unfavorable for the player. A set value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9H, the effect control CPU 120 performs the reach effect of the super reach A and the super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. Super Reach C and Super Reach D reach directing can be performed as suggestives, and when Super Reach C or Super Reach D reach directing is performed, the reach of Super Reach C or Super Reach D Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an enemy character is displayed or an enemy character is displayed in a manner related to the title to be notified later). By performing an effect that suggests a character), the effect of the effect is improved, and the player can be focused on the effect.

The present embodiment also includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A has a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An openable and closable opening / closing body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a);
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052) (for example, the setting shown in FIG. The part that executes the change process)
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value,
A restricting member (for example, a security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operations on the operation unit,
With
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state where the operation on the operation portion is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, a gaming machine). In the state in which the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are restricted, while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. In the closed state, the restriction state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and an allowable state in which the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is allowed is entered. 14 to 20- 7) describes a gaming machine, characterized in that, according to this feature improves the security. Specifically, since the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be prevented from being illegally operated when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A game control board (for example, main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted;
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for housing the game control board;
With
The operation unit is accommodated in the substrate case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is provided in the substrate case 105SG201 together with the main substrate 11. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, etc.) are described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the setting switching main body is protected using the substrate case 105SG201 that can accommodate the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation part so that the operation of the operation part is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulating member is permeable (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are made of a permeable plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are accommodated in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through.) According to this characteristic, the security is improved. Specifically, since a part of the substrate case 105SG201 can be covered with the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C, it is possible to suppress illegal acts on the main substrate 11 as well as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. Further, since it is possible to check the main board 11 through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C, whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. Can be easily confirmed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Provided with detection means (for example, door opening sensor 105SG090) capable of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body;
The setting means does not set a set value even when the operation unit is operated when the detection means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, as shown in FIGS. The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change process is not executed unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12. According to this feature, the security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the game ball has entered the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and the game ball has entered the general winning port. The part where the winning ball is paid out based on the fact that it has entered, and that the game ball has entered the big prize opening)
Information display means (for example, display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means;
With
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-120, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a role ratio, and a base in the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the game ball has entered the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and the game ball has entered the general winning port. The part where the winning ball is paid out based on the fact that it has entered, and that the game ball has entered the big prize opening)
Information display means (for example, display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means;
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base. ), And according to this feature, there is no need to provide a separate display device for displaying the set value, thereby preventing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern as one of a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variation pattern setting process);
Variable display execution means for executing variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing);
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern to use at different ratios according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). Is a part that determines each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach at different ratios based on the set value set), according to this feature, Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to identify the set value that has been set from the state of determination of the variable display pattern, it is possible to increase the effect of the effect by the variable display pattern.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of a plurality of advantageous states (for example, a big hit gaming state of big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) based on a set value that has been set. There,
The ratio of which one of the plurality of advantageous states to be controlled is different depending on whether the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value or the second setting value (for example, A portion in which the ratio of determining whether to control the big hit game of big hit A, big hit B or big hit C is different depending on whether the set value is 1, 2 or 3 ), And according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A holding storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) capable of storing information relating to variable display as a holding storage,
When a new set value is set by the setting means when the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means, the stored hold storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5, The game machine is characterized by the fact that the reserved memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value). According to this feature, the reserved memory is stored across the setting change. Since it is not memorize | stored, a setting change can be reflected exactly.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
Variable winning means (for example, a big prize opening) that can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or impossible to win than the first state;
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the big hit release process);
With
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-13). In addition, there is described a gaming machine characterized in that a prize winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the game medium can be won from straddling the change of the set value and the change of the set value from being accurately reflected.

The present embodiment also includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A has a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An openable and closable opening / closing body (for example, gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a);
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052) (for example, the setting shown in FIG. The part that executes the change process)
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value,
A restricting member (for example, a security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of restricting operations on the operation unit,
With
The restriction member can be switched between a first state that restricts the operation on the operation unit and a second state that does not restrict the operation on the operation unit (for example, the security cover 105SG500B is in a covering position with respect to the substrate case 105SG201). The security cover 105SG500C has a covering position and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position around the pivot 105SG500Cd. Can be rotated between)
When the restriction member is in the second state when the opening / closing body is open, the opening / closing body cannot be closed unless the restriction member is switched from the second state to the first state (for example, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B is not slid from the covering release position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the restricted state). The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a (unless it is changed), making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (Modification 1) ./ Pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed If it is in the state, as shown in FIG. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not rotated to the covering position (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500C may come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 may be closed. A gaming machine characterized by being impossible (Modification 2)) is described, and according to this characteristic, security can be improved. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed in the second state, that is, in a state where the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the covering release position, security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A game control board (for example, main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted;
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for housing the game control board;
With
The operation unit is accommodated in the substrate case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is provided in the substrate case 105SG201 together with the main substrate 11. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, etc.) are described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the setting switching main body is protected using the substrate case 105SG201 that can accommodate the main substrate 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The restriction member is a member that covers the operation part so that the operation of the operation part is restricted in the restricted state,
At least a part of the regulating member is permeable (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are made of a permeable plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are accommodated in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through.) According to this characteristic, the security is improved. Specifically, since a part of the substrate case 105SG201 can be covered with the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C, it is possible to suppress illegal acts on the main substrate 11 as well as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. Further, since it is possible to check the main board 11 through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C without releasing the restrictions by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C, whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. Can be easily confirmed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Provided with detection means (for example, door opening sensor 105SG090) capable of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body;
The setting means does not set a set value even when the operation unit is operated when the detection means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, as shown in FIGS. The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change process is not executed unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12. According to this feature, the security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the game ball has entered the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and the game ball has entered the general winning port. The part where the winning ball is paid out based on the fact that it has entered, and that the game ball has entered the big prize opening)
Information display means (for example, display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means;
With
The information display means is capable of displaying predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-120, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a role ratio, and a base in the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the game ball has entered the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and the game ball has entered the general winning port. The part where the winning ball is paid out based on the fact that it has entered, and that the game ball has entered the big prize opening)
Information display means (for example, display monitor 105SG029 in Modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means;
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the display monitor 105SG029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base. ), And according to this feature, there is no need to provide a separate display device for displaying the set value, thereby preventing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern as one of a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variation pattern setting process);
Variable display execution means for executing variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing);
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern to use at different ratios according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). Is a part that determines each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach at different ratios based on the set value set), according to this feature, Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to identify the set value that has been set from the state of determination of the variable display pattern, it is possible to increase the effect of the effect by the variable display pattern.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of a plurality of advantageous states (for example, a big hit gaming state of big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) based on a set value that has been set. There,
The ratio of which one of the plurality of advantageous states to be controlled is different depending on whether the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value or the second setting value (for example, A portion in which the ratio of determining whether to control the big hit game of big hit A, big hit B or big hit C is different depending on whether the set value is 1, 2 or 3 ), And according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A holding storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) capable of storing information relating to variable display as a holding storage,
When a new set value is set by the setting means when the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means, the stored hold storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5, The game machine is characterized by the fact that the reserved memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value). According to this feature, the reserved memory is stored across the setting change. Since it is not memorize | stored, a setting change can be reflected exactly.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
Variable winning means (for example, a big prize opening) that can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or impossible to win than the first state;
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the big hit release process);
With
The variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state when a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-13). In addition, there is described a gaming machine characterized in that a prize winning opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the game medium can be won from straddling the change of the set value and the change of the set value from being accurately reflected.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 105SG001a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side. Also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (A) and 20-14 (B) as a first modification, a security cover 105SG500B composed of a short piece 105SG500Ba and a long piece 105SG500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 105SG201. Thus, the right end of the long piece 105SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. Provide to be movable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201, thereby locking through the through hole 105SG500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 105SG500Bb. The switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500B (long piece 105SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the left-right direction. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid rightward with respect to the board case 105SG201 to release the state where the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (A) and 20-14 (B), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the projecting dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is extended to a length L2 by sliding the security cover 105SG500B with respect to the board case 105SG201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 105SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 105SG201. By sliding the board case 105SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), a game clerk or the like operates the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to play a pachinko game. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B is moved to the board case 105SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 105SG201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if it is not slid (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, and therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 set by the security cover 105SG500B is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 105SG003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 105SG500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 105SG001a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, thereby restricting movement in the left-right direction from the covering position. However, the security cover 105SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are covered by the security cover 105SG500B is maintained. .

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (A) and 20-16 (B) as a second modification, the left end of the security cover 105SG500C is attached to the gaming machine. Around the pivot 105SG500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 105SG003 and faces the vertical direction, the cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is rotated from the cover position. You may be pivotally supported between the covering release positions. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Ca is locked to the locking portion 105SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the long piece 105SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 105SG051. What is necessary is just to make it control the rotation to the back side from the state which has covered switch 105SG052 from the back side.

  When the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are rotated by rotating the security cover 105SG500C around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201. What is necessary is just to cancel | release the state which coat | covered and to enable operation. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 105SG500C (long piece 105SG500Cb) covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are set. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the security cover 105SG500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the A store clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view and the lock switch is operated by the security cover 105SG500C. If the cover 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not covered (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 105SG500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. It is impossible.

  For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, so that the lock switch 105SG051 by the security cover 105SG500C is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 105SG003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by opening the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 105SG003a. When the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 105SG003a in this way, the modification 3 is shown in FIGS. 20-18 (A) to 20-18 (C). In this way, a through-hole 105SG003b is formed below the gaming machine frame 105SG003, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated through the through-hole 105SG003b. In this case, a mounting surface such as an IC on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are on the opposite side of the main board 11 from the mounting surface. Placed on the surface.

  When the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated through the through-hole 105SG003b as described above, the door body 105SG003c that can open and close the through-hole 105SG003b is provided, and the door body 105SG003c is closed. Thus, the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be restricted. 20-18 (B) and 20-18 (C), when the door body 105SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 105SG003a. Since 105SG003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 105SG003a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game using a game ball has been disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each pachinko gaming machine 1 The total number of game balls that enter the (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) is counted, and the linkage ratio, role ratio, base, etc. are based on the counting. The various types of winning information may be calculated. In addition, when the winning information can be calculated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) as a modified example 4, the display monitor 105SG029 displays the winning ratio, the ratio, The base or the like may be displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (A) and 20-19 (B), the display monitor 105SG029 in the present modification 4 includes a first display unit 105SG029105SG0A, a second display unit 105SG029B, and a third display. Part 105SG029C, 4th display part 105SG029D, and 5th display part 105SG029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E is configured by seven segments each including seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots disposed on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 20-19 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. The set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display portion 105SG029A in the first digit, and the summation period is displayed on the second display portion 105SG029B in the second digit and the third display portion 105SG029C in the third digit. In the fourth display part 105SG029D in the fourth digit and the fifth display part 105SG029E in the fifth digit, numerical values are displayed as percentages. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative run ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. In display No5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the percentage of the total number of winning balls that is based on the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good. The base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the short-term role of the display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, when the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display section 105SG029D and the fifth display section 105SG029E display the short-term ratio as a percentage (displayed in%) and display the short-term ratio of display No2. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” Is displayed on the 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total display ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  In the fourth modification, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 105SG029 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-20 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), when display on the display monitor 105SG029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-1), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-2), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. In addition, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-3), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. "Is displayed, and" 6. "is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative continuous ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-4), “1” that is a set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. "Is displayed, and" 7. "is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of base 1 of display No5, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-5), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Characters are displayed, and characters “L.” are displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the characters “0.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. A character is displayed, and a character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

  And when the display of display No5 continues for 5 seconds, as shown to FIG. 20-20 (B-1), the short-term connection ratio of display No1 will be displayed. The short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the base 2 of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of only the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No2 to base 2 of display No5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 105SG029 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, these short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 20-20 (A) and 20-20 (B-1) to FIG. -20 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 105SG030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base when the set value is “1” 1. When base 2 is displayed and the set value is “2”, when the short-term run ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative run ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, and the set value is “3” It is possible to sequentially change the display to the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 display. If the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  If the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated during display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In addition, in the display monitor 105SG029 of the fourth modification, the form in which the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base in each set value can be displayed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor In 105SG029, only one numerical value or only two numerical values may be displayed among these connection ratio, role ratio, and base.

  Further, in the fourth modification, a connection ratio, a hand ratio, and a base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and a form in which the connection ratio, the hand ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 without calculating the run ratio, the hand ratio, and the base. Good.

  In the fourth modification, only the short-term role ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 105SG029, and the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative length ratio, the total cumulative role ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term service ratio, the total cumulative service ratio, and the total cumulative service ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative role ratio, and the total cumulative role ratio.

  (Modification 5)

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which can change the setting value of this pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The change of the set value may be executable during the game. In the case of changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game, for example, first, after a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the display switch 105SG029 is turned on by turning on the lock switch 105SG051. After the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed, the store clerk or the like of the game hall operates the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to change the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. Then, when a store clerk or the like of the game hall pushes the lock switch 105SG051, the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is set as the setting value of the new pachinko gaming machine 1, and in the backup area of the RAM 102 Store it. Note that after a new set value is set, data such as special figure hold memory and general figure hold memory may be deleted. In this way, by clearing data such as special figure hold memory and universal figure hold memory, a new hold memory that results in a big hit of the variable display result due to a change in the setting value or a new variable It is possible to prevent the winning ball apparatus 6B from being opened (a win per game will occur) and an unreasonable big hit from the variable display result being executed.

(Other disclosures)
In the above embodiment, the game machine frame 105SG003 that can open and close the opening of the outer frame 105SG001a and the glass door frame 105SG003a that can open and close the front surface of the game machine frame 105SG003 are exemplified as the opening and closing body. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door that can open and close the front opening of the housing, such as a slot machine. Moreover, not only the thing which can be opened and closed by rotation, but the thing which opens and closes by a slide or attachment or detachment may be used.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which applied lock switch 105SG051 and setting changeover switch 105SG052 as an operation part was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Of lock switch 105SG051 and setting changeover switch 105SG052, Only one of them may be used, or other operation units such as other switches, buttons, levers, dials, touch sensors, and the like having different operation modes (for example, pulling operation, pushing operation, rotation operation, etc.) may be used.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which applied security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C as a control member was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, An operation part is used for such a plate-shaped member. Even if it is not a member to be covered, the shape, size, material, and the like can be variously changed as long as the operation of the operation unit can be restricted. Specifically, for example, instead of covering the operation unit, the operation unit may be regulated by contacting the operation unit.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, security cover 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C as a restricting member should just be in a state where operation is difficult by covering an operation part in the restriction state of an operation part, and operation is not necessarily impossible It doesn't have to be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the setting switching main-body part which has operation parts, such as lock switch 105SG051 and setting changeover switch 105SG052, was illustrated in the main board | substrate 11, this invention is not limited to this. The main substrate 11 may be provided on a separate substrate, may be accommodated in a case other than the substrate case 105SG201, or may not be accommodated in the substrate case 105SG201.

  In the first and second modifications, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C as the restricting members exemplify a form in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed in the covering release position, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of closing the gaming machine frame 105SG003, for example, an interlocking mechanism that interlocks with the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided so that the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C return from the coating release position to the coating position. May be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the board | substrate case 105SG201 provided with lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 was illustrated in the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. If the game machine frame 105SG003 is closed and is provided at a position where the operation is difficult, a glass door frame at a place other than the back of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the front of the game machine frame 105SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 105SG003a or an outer frame 105SG001a).

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variation display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, and according to the variation display result derived to the image display device The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated.

(Explanation regarding feature 112IW)
Next, the feature part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board that constitutes a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window between a door opening position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened centering on the left side and a door closing position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a shop clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the shop clerk can use the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The main board 11 has a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (playing rate), which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit operable by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are accommodated. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

  Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature 112IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by a single key.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed, There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. In view of this, in this feature 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 21-2 and 21-3, the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 21-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 112IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are disabled by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A restricts the operation on the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, An illegal member such as a wire or a cell board is entered from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be manipulated to change the setting value. Therefore, the security cover 112IW500A may be used to change the setting with the setting key 112IW051 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Restricted state in which operation on operation unit including switch 112IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In this feature 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 21-4 and FIG. 21-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( 21), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like shown in FIG. 21-6 are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature 112IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature 112IW, the winning probability for the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, a case where the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration indicated by the feature 112IW may be applied.

  In this feature 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in this feature part 112IW, the case where the advantage increases in the order of the set value “1” <the set value “2” <the set value “3” is shown. For example, the rank of the advantage according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit is likely to be obtained with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature 112IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 21-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature 112IW, a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed) A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is comprised so that it may be used, a different table may be provided and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined may be different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the jackpot type determination random number (MR2) is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 and a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 21-5 (B). In the feature 112IW, the fanfare period, interval period and ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the production control board 12 side, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for informing the start of the round is executed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process in step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type C is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 112IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  This feature 112IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggest a set value during the big hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  Also, in this feature 112IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature 112IW, in both cases of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature 112IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. The feature 112IW is configured such that the ratio of winning big hits is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  In addition, in this feature 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  In addition, in this feature 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type. However, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In this feature 112IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  In addition, in this feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 but the gaming property itself does not change is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 21-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 21-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real-time clock or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  In both the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and (B), the normal reach loss and the super reach loss occur in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (B). The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss when it is other than non-reach loss depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature 112IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach lose and the entire super reach lose differ depending on the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  The feature 112IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, even when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image to display the effect symbols in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the effect design is different from the normal pattern, and the set value is 1 or 2) May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 21-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 includes non-reach loses A to C, and any of non-reach loses A to C, normal reach loses, and super reach loses. You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 21-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, since the ratio that is determined to be non-reach loss C is high, the variation time at the time of non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 112IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average variation time varies depending on the set value by varying the ratio of non-reach loss A to C with different variation times. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when providing multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the time for the display of shaking of the production symbol and the high-speed fluctuation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  Further, in this feature 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the finalized design symbol (final final design) The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the confirmed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the feature unit 112IW, the winning time of the big hit is configured by setting the variation time to each of the non-reach loses A to C and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C being determined for each set value. When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) is higher.

  Note that the feature 112IW is provided with a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. For this reason, in this feature 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more may be varied according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls that enter each winning mouth (big winning mouth, second big winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, general winning mouth) Aggregation can be performed, and various winning information such as run ratio, role ratio, and base can be calculated based on the aggregation.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-8 (A) and 21-8 (B), the display monitor 112IW029 includes a first display unit 112IW029A, a second display unit 112IW029B, a third display unit 112IW029C, and a fourth display unit. A display unit 112IW029D and a fifth display unit 112IW029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E is configured by seven segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots disposed on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  On the display monitor 112IW029, items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 21-8 (B) are displayed. The first display part 112IW029A in the first digit displays the set values (1 to 3), and the total period is displayed in the second display part 112IW029B in the second digit and the third display part 112IW029C in the third digit. The numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 112IW029D in the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 112IW029E in the fifth digit. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative run ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. In display No5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the percentage of the total number of winning balls that is based on the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good. The base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, when the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display section 112IW029D and the fifth display section 112IW029E display the short-term ratio as a percentage (displayed in%) and display the short-term ratio of display No2. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the base 1 of display No5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of display No4 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” Is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total display ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  In the feature unit 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 21-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), when display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No2, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-2), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-3), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. "Is displayed, and the character" 6. "is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-4), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. "Is displayed, and" 7. "is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No5, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Characters are displayed, and characters “L.” are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the characters “0.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters “6.” are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

  And when the display of display No5 continues for 5 seconds, as shown to FIG. 21-9 (B-1), the short-term connection ratio of display No1 will be displayed. The short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the base 2 of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of only the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No2 to base 2 of display No5 is red. Thus, the display monitor 112IW029 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Furthermore, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 is shown in FIGS. 21-9 (A) and 21-9 (B-1) to FIG. -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative length ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base when the set value is “1” 1. When base 2 is displayed and the set value is “2”, when the short-term run ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative run ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, and the set value is “3” It is possible to sequentially change the display to the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 display. If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In the feature section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form capable of displaying the connection ratio, role ratio, and base in each set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these connection ratio, role ratio, and base.

  In addition, in the feature unit 112IW, a connection ratio, a hand ratio, and a base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the display of the connection ratio, the hand ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the run ratio, the hand ratio, and the base. Good.

  Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 displays only the short-term role ratio in red, and the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative role ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term service ratio, the total cumulative service ratio, and the total cumulative service ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative role ratio, and the total cumulative role ratio.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIGS. 21-10 and 21-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the feature 112IW. In this feature 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is made, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the production control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and checks whether the value of the production control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004, and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to start up, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and recovery processing, etc. are executed. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, clears a factory default setting flag indicating that the factory default setting is stored in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). In step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. In step 112IWS006, the setting flag is cleared. do it. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the setting value remains unchanged from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not the value at the time of shipment from the factory remains the same. If the factory default setting is maintained (step 112IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data by the same process as step S5 (performed using the error detection code), and the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, there are areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the linkage ratio, duty ratio, and base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9 in the storage area of the RAM 102. Cleared and information for performance display such as link ratio, role ratio, and base is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 1 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is OFF (N in Step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is OFF (N in Step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In step 112IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014 but proceeds to a loop process.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in this feature unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N of steps 112IWS007 and S008), or when the setting at the time of factory shipment is left (step 112IWS006 Y), if a power interruption occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. On the condition that the RAM is cleared, the set value after step 112IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is released and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop process is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step 112IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If setting key 112IW051 is on, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that setting confirmation processing is to be started to effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  When the setting check process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in Step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in Step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production | presentation control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power failure to the production | presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, among the storage areas of the RAM 102, areas for storing performance display information such as the connection ratio, role ratio, and base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9, and setting values The area other than the area for storing is cleared, and the performance display information such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the set value information are not cleared but are retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating the start of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). In addition, CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in Step 112IWS025) or if the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in Step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  In the feature unit 112IW, the processes in steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes in steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 21-12 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (step 112IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting check error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting confirmation error, and executes the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting check error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again and the process is not allowed to proceed.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

  Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 21-12 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (Y at step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2” and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. May update the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to “3”, and if “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to “1”. In addition, the CPU 103 stores the setting value (the updated setting value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored setting value) (step 112IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If setting key 112IW051 is on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeated. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 112IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating a setting change error, and executes the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the process does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (see Y of step 112IWS009, 112IWS014). The error state will be released.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

  FIG. 21-13 is an explanatory diagram of processing executed when the power is turned on. In this feature 112IW, as shown in FIG. 21-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is on. If so, a setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, a setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the restoration process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-14 (A) and 21-14 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  When the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 as described above, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (E), the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall. Is stored (updated) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify a store clerk or the like of the game hall that a new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 21-14 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  In the setting change processing in the feature unit 112IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature 112IW), or the most advantageous for the player The set value (“3” in the case of this feature 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIGS. 21-15 and 21-16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol in the feature unit 112IW. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As already described, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 112IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step 112 The set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112IWS108.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, a variation pattern command corresponding to the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) is required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 112IWS011) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 112IWS108) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, a set value command for power-on and a set value command for start of variation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted when the power is turned on and when change starts. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which set value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. You may comprise so that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio may differ. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 21-4) with the random number MR1, and determines that the big hit or the small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 112IWS111). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in Step 112IWS111), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step 112IWS116.

  When the value of the random number MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 21-5) to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“jacket type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 112 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol for the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Direction mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 21-17 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the feature section 112IW. In this feature part 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number update process in step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In this feature 112IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process in step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date / time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 112IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag is set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

(Command analysis processing)

  FIG. 21-18 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). When read, the read pointer value is incremented by +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112IWS304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 112). 112IWS305). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 112IWS306).

  In this feature 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. The Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where no set value is stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is executed. A configuration value command may be transmitted whenever the power is turned on.

  In addition, in this feature 112IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to a missing command or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 112 IWS 305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 reads the set value command, You may comprise so that it may be determined whether the setting value contained is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the newly received set value command is used. It may be configured to determine that a mismatch has occurred and to determine that there is an abnormality when the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 112IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature section 112IW, when the presentation control board 12 receives one of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, the setting change process end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process. In the image display device 5, a control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of effect symbols which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance production).

  If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, an initial appearance determination table is used to combine an even number of initial appearances (for example, “246”, “224”, etc.) that are a combination of even numbered effects and an odd number of effects. A certain odd initial appearance (for example, “135”, “113”, etc.) and a special initial appearance, which is a combination of performance symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols), are determined (step 112 IWS 309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  FIG. 21-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 112IWS309, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), the ratio determined to the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 112IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A) to determine the initial output (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  When the processing of steps 112IWS310 to S311 is executed, the feature 112IW cannot receive the set value command normally, and if it is the production mode A, the set value that is the most unfavorable setting. The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined to be an odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined to be a special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  FIG. 21-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-19 (B), in the initial outcome determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to be an odd initial outcome as compared to the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, in this feature unit 112IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial appearance determined in steps 112IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 112IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance as an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5. The control for displaying the even initial number is performed (step 112IWS315).

  When the process of step 112IWS315 is executed, the feature unit 112IW uniformly displays the even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the odd-numbered initial appearance symbol determination ratio is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial outcome is uniformly displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 112 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is one of an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration, and a setting confirmation process end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 Then, the initial appearance is determined to be the even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even initial appearance (step 112IWS317). In the feature unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial appearance is determined to be the even initial appearance and is not determined to be the odd initial appearance. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 112IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, and outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. Or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full color LED). It is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in a variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and a variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in a display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

  The feature unit 112IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but the odd initial number may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the initial appearance effect described above, In the game, during the game display, the suggestion effect during the game, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, the effect during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed Has been. In this feature 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes each having different suggestion reliability. You may make it the reliability of suggestion differ for every. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 21-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a variation start command reception flag (for example, a variation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. (Step 112IWS401).

  When the variation start command reception flag is set, the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration production (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the variation start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the variation start command reception flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 is not executing the customer waiting demonstration production (N in step 112IWS406), and whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches a predetermined condition. Is confirmed (step 112IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when a timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the change display has not been executed once and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period elapses without executing variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 112 IWS 408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game has not yet started.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution are determined according to the set value (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  In this feature 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the controlled waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect aspect is controlled. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 21-21 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence / absence and execution mode of the pre-game suggestion effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-21 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of execution of pre-game suggestion effects increases in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. It has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), the third effect may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting change has been performed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 112IWS411). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, the production mode is determined (step 112IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  When the process of steps 112IWS411 to S412 is executed, the feature unit 112IW cannot receive the set value command normally and is in the rendering mode A, the set value that is the most unfavorable setting. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and it is not determined as the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112 IWS 414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself determined is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS413 to S414, in this feature 112IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of being present, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode, thereby reducing the situation where the player is disappointed and discouraged, thereby preventing the lowering of interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 112IWS416 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is limited so as not to be executed.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS 413, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, The situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed despite the unfavorable set value being set and the player is discouraged is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion production may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 21-21 (A), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects seems to be performed according to a setting value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 112IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at different ratios according to the setting value. This is because the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  The feature unit 112IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting change is not performed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, even when the setting is not changed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 21-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of recovery is received. When comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A) and the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When not being performed, the proportion of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect is low and the difference in execution proportion between the set values is also smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing in this way, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a form including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (excluding pre-game suggestion effects) (step 112IWS416). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the process of step 112 IWS 416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestion effects (indication suggestion during game or suggestion effect during jackpot), execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A demonstration of waiting for a customer in a manner in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS 416 is executed, a customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the production control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (the production mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, the big hit suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. Information may be stored, and an effect may be executed in which a setting value is estimated from the information and notified. In addition, this production | presentation alert | reports the setting expectation degree (or setting value estimated) calculated based on the predetermined reference | standard from the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect | action, and does not alert | report an actual setting value. .

  In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 112IWS416, but information related to the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, and the interest can be enhanced. . Note that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using, for example, a real-time clock or the like, without being limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW. Also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information related to the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. You may comprise. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by a player accessing the Web server using a mobile terminal (or analyzing a two-dimensional code) and displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. Moreover, the setting suggestion image which suggests a setting value may be displayed on the display apparatus with which a portable terminal is equipped, when a player reads the two-dimensional code containing execution history information using a portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(Indication suggestion processing during game)
FIG. 21-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a suggestion effect determination process during gaming. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 112IWS502) when it is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the second game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and the special period flag is reset when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 112IWS501 whether the special period is in progress.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution are determined (step 112IWS505).

  FIG. 21-23 (A) is an explanatory view showing the first game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 21-23 (B) is the second game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

  In addition, with respect to the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A) The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger. In other words, the second rendering mode has a high degree of reliability with respect to being set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first rendering mode.

  In addition, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a special period can be provided, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (appearance of character C) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, the setting value “3” is determined by executing the game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 112IWS506). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112IWS507).

  When the processing of steps 112IWS506 to S507 is executed, the feature unit 112IW has a setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. The presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio to be determined to execute the game suggesting effect is low and the ratio to be determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS509).

  FIG. 21C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. There is also no case of being determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS508 to S509, in this feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are executed to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the player is discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the game.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS508, in this feature 112IW, when the set value command is not normally received and in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game is not executed. Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is disappointed and disappointed is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the suggestion effect during game is set lower than the set value “1” of the suggestion effect determination table during game shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 21-23 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 112IW, it is possible to execute a game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. This is because the game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the second effect mode) 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, although it is comprised so that a suggestion effect in the game of a common aspect (for example, 1st effect aspect) is executable by a special period and a non-special period, it is not restricted to such a structure. It may be possible to execute a different suggestion effect during the game. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the feature unit 112IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game and the effect mode in the execution are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period is set and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of reach production, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous production, the type of pseudo-continuous production, the display result is a big hit Depending on whether or not the game suggestion effect is executed, whether or not it is executed may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during game may be executable only when the variation pattern includes a reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the degree of reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed increases, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-continuous effect (or the number of pseudo-continuous times is smaller than that of the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. It may be made higher, or the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased and is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. The degree of reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. .

(Determination processing during big hit)
FIG. 21-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect determination process is executed in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  In step S112IWS602, when the variation display is a specific period (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period) from the game start time to a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter also referred to as specific period), When the big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined. The “game start time” here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this feature 112IW, a specific period is a period from when the game is started to when the change display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from when the game is started until the variation display is executed a specific time (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from when the game is started until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

  In both the first and second big hit suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B), the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the big hit suggestion effect.

  Moreover, about the 2nd production mode and the 3rd production mode, the ratio which is executed in order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, execution ratio between setting values in specific period and non-specific period The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a specific period can be given, and interest can be enhanced. Not only the configuration of the feature unit 112IW but also the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period and not be executed during a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In this feature 112IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B1), a speech C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

  Also, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), after the effect symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, As shown in 21-27 (C1), a speech D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 112IWS603). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  When the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604 is executed, the feature unit 112IW has a setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the setting of an unfavorable setting value, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage are executed with the big hit suggesting stage and the player is disappointed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. If it is the production mode C, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit suggestion production and the production mode using the big hit suggestion production determination table for the production mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  FIG. 21-25 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-25 (C), in the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself determined to execute the big hit suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS605 to S606, in this feature 112IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of being present, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage can be used to reduce the situation in which the big hit suggesting stage is executed and disappointing the player and discouraging the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 112IWS607 as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to perform the big hit suggestion production.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS605, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even in the case where the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the big hit suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit suggestion effect is further set lower than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B) is used. The presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 3rd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25 (A), when a big hit is made in a specific period, it is configured such that a suggestion effect during a big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, you may make it vary the ratio which is not performed according to a setting value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25 (B), the ratio that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio that is not executed according to the set value is different. You may make it let.

  Further, in this feature 112IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, it is configured so that a big hit suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image indicating a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or notice effect is executed.

  In this feature 112IW, it is possible to execute a big hit suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value, but this is a big hit suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third The execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode is different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. This is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 21-26 (A1) and (B2), when the effect effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 performs the big hit suggestion effect. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In this feature 112IW, since the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 112IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 The dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the effect effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 112IW101, and there is a possibility that the speech image displayed by the suggestion effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and reducing the interest. Also, with such a configuration, even if the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, It is also possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the speech image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. Moreover, you may make it restrict | limit execution of an effect production only for a specific period. Moreover, not only the example shown to FIG. 21-25 (D), but also when a big hit suggestion effect is performed, you may make it perform an accessory effect in a low ratio.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the accessory effect (N in Step 112IWS608), the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect is determined (Step 112IWS609).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, there is provided a light guide plate 112IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate. In addition, it is assumed that there is provided a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, and “big hit” Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. The Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the jackpot of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being high is high, and the suggestion during the jackpot of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio that the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the big hit suggestive effect is difficult to visually recognize. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the speech A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the effect indication during the big hit of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  In this feature 112IW, the effect effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect aspect of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is an aspect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. The priority may be given to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  Further, in this feature 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-like movable body having an effect symbol on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the feature). May occur). Therefore, in the first-time fluctuation after changing the setting, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Moreover, in this feature part 112IW, although the effect production and the light guide plate production are configured to be able to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is made to the player. For example, when even-numbered initial outcomes are displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestion effect during game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the effect effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the present invention is not limited to an effect effect or a light guide plate effect, but includes an effect including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED to emit light in a predetermined manner By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific manner. Thus, the setting may be suggested.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) that suggests setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory being 0 or the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number is generated. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control, etc.) based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation effective period. (E.g., light emission control of the lamp) may be executed.

  The characteristic portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the feature portion 112IW, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. Also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 (A) and 21-28 (B) as a modified example 1, a security cover 112IW500B composed of a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 112IW201. Thus, the right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. Provide to be movable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201, so that the setting is made through the through-hole 112IW500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operable. In other words, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the horizontal direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid rightward relative to the board case 112IW201 to release the state where the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 (A) and 21-28 (B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the projecting dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 21-29 (A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 until the length becomes L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into an allowable state), a game shop clerk or the like operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to operate the pachinko game. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 21-29 (B), the security cover 112IW500B is moved to the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, and therefore the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500B is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, thereby restricting the movement in the left-right direction from the covering position. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are covered by the security cover 112IW500B is maintained. .

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIG. Around the pivot 112IW500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003 and faces the vertical direction, the cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is rotated from the covering position. You may be pivotally supported between the covering release positions. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 112IW051. The rotation from the state where the switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

  When the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security key 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201, thereby setting the key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. What is necessary is just to cancel | release the state which coat | covered and to enable operation. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are set. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-31 (A), the security cover 112IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating a setting key 112IW051 or a setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a store clerk or the like. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 21-31 (B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated in a clockwise direction in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 112IW500C. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is impossible.

  For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, so the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500C is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the feature part 112IW, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening the 112IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, the modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 21-32 (A) to 21-32 (C). As described above, the through-hole 112IW003b is formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated through the through-hole 112IW003b. In this case, a mounting surface such as an IC on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the opposite side of the main board 11 from the mounting surface. Placed on the surface.

  Thus, when the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through-hole 112IW003b, the door body 112IW003c that can open and close the through-hole 112IW003b is provided, and the door body 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 21-32 (B) and 21-32 (C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since 112IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the feature 112IW includes the first invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 112IWS005 to S010)
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) CPU 112 performs steps 112IWS409-S415, S504-S509, S601-S606),
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As an example, there is described a gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604). In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. A decrease in interest in games can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. Suggesting effect determining means to determine (for example, a portion for executing steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, and S606 in the CPU 120 for effect control)
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 112IWS410, S505, and S602 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). (Step 112IWS412, S507, S604 are executed based on the set value “1”)
According to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In this feature 112IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect” includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestion effect, but also including determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game can be played from an early time zone. Motivation to perform can be given, and game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112 IWS 416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestive effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the first invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a big hit game) in the advantageous state may be different according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the first invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the first invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) You may do Have been described, this arrangement improves the security.

Further, the feature 112IW includes the second invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 112IWS005 to S010)
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) CPU 112 performs steps 112IWS409-S415, S504-S509, S601-S606),
The suggestion effect execution means restricts execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs N, S508 in step 112IWS413). N, a game machine characterized in that when N in S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed), a setting that is set according to this feature is described. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. A decrease in interest in games can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game can be played from an early time zone. Motivation to perform can be given, and game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112 IWS 416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestive effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a big hit game) in the advantageous state may be different according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) You may do Have been described, this arrangement improves the security.

The feature 112IW includes the third invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 112IWS005 to S010)
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) CPU 112 performs steps 112IWS409-S415, S504-S509, S601-S606),
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, so that the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed). According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. A decrease in interest in games can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. Suggesting effect determining means to determine (for example, a portion for executing steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, and S606 in the CPU 120 for effect control)
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 112IWS410, S505, and S602 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, the big hit suggestion effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table, step 112IWS414. , S509, S606 may be executed), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game can be played from an early time zone. Motivation to perform can be given, and game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112 IWS 416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestive effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a big hit game) in the advantageous state may be different according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display may be different (for example, see FIG. 21-7) depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the third invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31) You may do Have been described, this arrangement improves the security.

  In addition, in this feature part 112IW, it is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the setting value information is not normally input when controlled to effect mode A, If the suggestion effect is configured to be executed as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player (configuration of the first invention described above) and is controlled in the effect mode B, the set value When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the configuration of the second invention described above), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the third invention described above). I can't catch it. For example, according to the gaming state, the control method according to any one of the first to third inventions may be used to switch the suggestion effect. In this case, for example, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the first invention described above), and if the game state is a short time state, the configuration value (the configuration of the second invention described above) is limited when the set value information is not normally input If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect when the set value information is not normally input ( (Structure of the third invention described above)).

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the first to third inventions described above, and the suggestion effect can be configured to be executed using only one of the control methods. Also good.

  In addition, in the case where the setting value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing or garbled data, the feature unit 112IW controls execution of the suggestion effect by the control method of the first to third inventions (suggestion Although the case where the production is limited) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the first to third inventions. You may make it control (a suggestion effect is restrict | limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different in each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered set value such as the set value “1” or “3”, a long game occurs when a long game is likely to occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even number setting value such as setting value “2”, it is configured so that the likelihood of the extended resort is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that suggests an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the first to third inventions. It may be configured so as to restrict the suggestion effect.

The feature 112IW also includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) depending on the set value that has been set A game machine characterized in that the game machine is capable of executing a game, such as an initial appearance effect, etc. According to this feature, the game machine is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of performance identification information (for example, a design symbol),
The suggestion effect execution means displays a suggestion effect (for example, different identification information for effect depending on the set value set) in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed (for example, It is described that it may be possible to execute display of an odd-numbered initial appearance), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 21). -21 (A) and (B), it is described that a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with a different determination value may be used). Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value that has been set after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have higher reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 112IW also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be given effectively, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times) after the setting value is changed. It is characterized in that the suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)). According to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 21-6 (A), ( B))
It is described that the variable display execution unit may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. (For example, see FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of executions of reach effects or pseudo-continuous effects has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect) (For example, when a big hit is generated within a specific period, the big hit suggestion can be executed) (FIG. 21-25). (See A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 112IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B)).
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS 416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means can notify the number of times that the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416), and according to such a configuration, Amusement entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means can notify the content of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute step S112IWS416), and according to such a configuration, Amusement entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means may be able to notify information related to the suggested suggestion that was executed while waiting for a customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112 IWS 416). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by the imaging device;
It is described that the specific image may be provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5) that can be captured by the imaging device, and according to such a configuration, Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 112IW also includes a seventh invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.)
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further includes a restricting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). (D)) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing overlaps between the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, either one is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) It is described that it may be changed so as to be executed during a period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restriction means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 21-25 (D). ), It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, suggesting during a big hit) It is described that control may be performed so that it does not stop at a position where it overlaps the speech image produced by the effect), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect in preference to the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present feature 112IW includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest may be lowered by executing a setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value that has been set
The setting suggestion executing means can execute setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.)
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with a hard-acting effect rendering, a light guide plate rendering, an error display, and the like.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an effect effect) for operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). According to such a configuration, The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light transmissive plate capable of transmitting light (for example, the light guide plate 112IW103);
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflector provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the big hit of the first effect mode; see FIGS. 21-25 (A) and (B)). The second setting suggestion that suggests that the second setting value, which is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value, is set (for example, a big hit suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 21-25 ( A) and (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 21-25 (E)). In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting a setting suggestion execution ratio (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided in the gaming machine (management It is possible to change the setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating the user). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. .

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is arranged;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 112IW includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during a big hit game) varies depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-5). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling ability from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the fanfare control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the interval control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the ending control period in the advantageous state may be different according to the set value (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 21-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that there may be provided suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during jackpot) in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Providing production execution means capable of performing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of a set value that is set during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, the joyfulness becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set values that are set.
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be different depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, refer to FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 112IW also includes the following tenth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined control period (for example, variable time) relating to variable display differs according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7). According to this, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the variable display period may be different depending on the set value (for example, refer to FIG. 21-7), and according to such a configuration, gambling is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, gambling may become too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period for variable display may be longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 21-7). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, the joyfulness becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means may determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display the set values that have been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Note that the structure indicated by the characteristic portion 112IW can be combined with a structure indicated by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, when executing the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect shown in the feature section 112IW, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect. In some cases, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect may be configured so as to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic portion 31AK.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portions 261F to 263F)
Next, the characteristic portions 261F to 263F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic portions 261F to 263F, for example, a description will be given of control for executing a specific effect based on motion detection by a detection unit that can detect the motion (operation) of a player such as the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B. The characteristic part 261F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-1 to 22-8. The feature portion 262F will be described with reference to FIG. The feature portion 263F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-10 to 22-12 and the like.

  The configuration described in the following characteristic units 261F to 263F may or may not be applied to a configuration capable of executing the setting confirmation process and the setting change process such as the jackpot probability described above. In addition, the effects described in the following characteristic portions 261F to 263F may be used as effects that can suggest a set value such as a big hit probability in the pachinko gaming machine in which the setting such as the big hit probability can be changed. For example, depending on the type of the set value of the jackpot probability that is currently set, it is possible to create an effect that can suggest the set value such as the jackpot probability by changing a part of the effect modes of various effects shown below.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 261F]
The feature portion 261F will be described. In the effect control CPU 120, a meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display indicated by the image in response to detection of a continuous operation of the push button 31B (hereinafter referred to as continuous hitting) as a continuous operation by the player's own power. In addition, for example, a determination of automatic continuous hitting that the hitting of the push button 31B is executed at a predetermined interval based on detection of a predetermined action of the player different from the continuous hitting, such as a long press operation of the push button 31B. In response to this, a meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display is executed.

  In the meter effect, various effect controls as described below are executed. FIG. 22-1 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the meter effect. When variation display is performed with a variation pattern of a special reach (for example, a third super reach and a fourth super reach described later) as a specific variation pattern, FIGS. A meter effect as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22-1 (A), at the start of the special reach, the image display device 5 variably displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are moved from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the corner of the display area. These decorative symbols form a reach symbol in which the “left” and “right” decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and the “medium” symbol is variably displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to (D), a meter image 261F001 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5. The meter image 261F001 is an image having a plurality of scales (11 scales) in the vertical direction and displaying so-called meter values. The scale of the meter image 261F001 is a configuration in which one special stage “MAX scale” is provided on the stage of 10 “normal scales”. In the meter image 261F001, in accordance with the detection of the operation of the push button 120 by the player within the operation effective period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, the scale is partially set to the first color (blank portion in the figure). ) To the second color (design hatched portion), the meter value is displayed in the second color. The meter value changes (increases) from the bottom to the top as indicated by the dashed arrows in the figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to (D), a predetermined character image 261F005 is displayed on the right side of the meter image 261F001 (the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5). Below the character image 261F005, a button image 261F002 composed of an image simulating the push button 31B and a character image of “continuous hit!” Is displayed. By displaying the button image 261F002, the player's operation of operating the push button 31B (continuous hitting) is promoted for the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to (D), below the button image 261F002, an operation effective period image 261F004 showing the operation effective period of the push button 31B is displayed by a bar graph type meter display in a horizontal bar form. The In the operation effective period image 261F004, the operation effective period is indicated by a horizontal meter value (black portion in the figure) displayed in a reduced direction in the direction of the broken line arrow in the figure.

  When it is determined that the special reach effect is to be shifted to the first development effect, after the start of the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level L5 due to the self-stroke or the automatic stroke of the push button 31B by the user's action, the process proceeds to the first development effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special reach effect is to be shifted to the second development effect, as shown in FIG. 22-1 (C) after the start of the special reach effect, When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level L10 by the self-striking or auto-striking of the push button 31B by the player's action, the process proceeds to the second development effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special reach production is shifted to the special development production, after the start of the special reach production, as shown in FIG. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches a special stage level MAX due to the player's operation of the push button 31B by one-shot or auto-strike, the transition is made to a special development effect.

  Next, the relationship between the detection determination and the change in meter display of the meter image 261F001 will be described for each of the self-strike and auto-strike.

  FIG. 22-2 is a timing chart showing detection determination and meter display change in each of self-strike and auto-strike. In FIG. 22-2, (A) shows a timing chart of self-strike and (B) shows a timing chart of auto-strike.

  In FIGS. 22-2 (A) and (B), (a) ON / OFF of player's motion detection, (b) ON / OFF of determination of self-hit or auto-hit, (c) Meter for determining deviation The level of display and the level of meter display when (d) big hit determination is shown.

  First, self-strike will be described with reference to FIG. During the operation effective period, each time the short push operation of the push button 31B is detected as shown in FIGS. Each time the self-strike is detected and determined, a display in which the meter value display level (display number of the second color) of the meter image 261F001 increases step by step as shown in (c) and (d). Done.

  When the special development effect is determined not to shift to the special development effect, the meter value reaches the maximum level L10 as shown in (c) when the self-strike is detected and determined within the operation effective period. Control is performed to limit the increase in the meter value so that it can be reached but cannot reach level MAX.

  When selecting a special development effect that has been decided to shift to a special development effect, the meter value can reach the maximum level L10 as shown in (d) if the self-strike is detected and determined within the effective operation period. Thereafter, the meter value is automatically controlled so as to reach the level MAX beyond the level L10 regardless of the self-strike.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the self-strike is executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the maximum level L10 according to the detection of the self-strike. And when the decision not to shift to the special development effect is made, the change of the meter display due to self-strike is stopped at the maximum level L10, and when the decision to move to the special development effect is made, the meter display is automatically Control that reaches level MAX beyond level L10 is executed.

  Next, automatic continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. When a long-pressing operation for a specified period (for example, 1 second) or more of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, as in (e) and (f), it is assumed that repeated hits are executed at predetermined time intervals. Judgment is made repeatedly.

  When it is determined that the automatic continuous hit is determined by the automatic continuous hit determination, as shown in (f), it is determined that the continuous hit is executed at predetermined time intervals, and each time the determination is made, as shown in (g) and (h) In addition, display is performed in which the meter value display level (the number of second colors) of the meter image 261F001 increases by one step. The predetermined time interval at which it is determined that consecutive hits are executed by the automatic continuous hit is longer than the time interval at which it is determined that the self hit is executed. Thereby, the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the automatic repeated hitting is controlled to be slower than the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the self hitting.

  When the special development effect is determined not to shift to the special development effect, the meter value reaches the maximum level L5 as shown in (g) when the automatic continuous strike is detected and judged within the operation effective period. Control is performed to limit the increase in the meter value so that it can be reached but cannot reach level MAX.

  When selecting the special development effect that has been decided to shift to the special development effect, the meter value can reach the maximum level L5 as shown in (h) if auto-strike is detected and determined within the operation effective period. After that, the meter value is automatically controlled so as to reach the level MAX beyond the level L5 regardless of the automatic continuous hitting.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the automatic continuous hitting is executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the maximum level L5 according to the detection of the self hitting. And when the decision not to shift to the special development effect is made, the change of the meter display due to the auto-strike stops at the maximum level L5, and when the decision to move to the special development effect is made, the meter display is automatically Control for reaching level MAX beyond level L5 is executed.

  As described above, when the self-strike is performed and when the automatic repetitive strike is performed, the self-strike is detected and determined at a time interval shorter than the determination time interval of the automatic repetitive strike. When a meter effect is performed in which the meter value cannot reach level MAX, the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by self-strike is level L10, and the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by auto-strike is level. L5. When a meter effect that allows the meter value to reach level MAX is executed, the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by self-strike is level L10, and the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by auto-strike is level L5. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing, for each of the self-strike and automatic repetitive strikes, a display is automatically made so that the meter value automatically reaches the level MAX from the current level regardless of the operation.

The following effects can be obtained by the effect control shown in FIGS. 22-1 and 22-2.
(1) Meter effect when executing meter effect based on detection and determination of auto-strike when executing meter effect as specific effect based on detection and determination of self-strike Compared with the level L5, which is the meter value that can change the production mode of the meter as much as possible, the specific stage of the meter value that can change the production mode of the meter production as much as the level L10 makes the self-attack repeatedly You can make the player feel the significance.

  (2) In the operation effective period, when the production mode of the meter effect reaches the level L5 which is a predetermined stage, it becomes possible to shift to the first development effect, and the production mode of the meter effect reaches the level L10 which is a specific stage. In this case, the second development effect can be transferred. Thus, the player can continue by himself / herself because the type of the production mode of the development mode of the production mode of the meter production differs depending on whether the production mode of the meter production reaches a predetermined stage or a specific stage. It is possible to promote the operation.

  (3) When it is determined not to shift to the special development effect in the meter effect, the level MAX, which is a special stage of the meter effect, is a stage of the effect mode that cannot be reached when the self-strike is executed. As a result, when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 side so that the level MAX cannot be reached even if the player hits himself / herself at too high a speed. The stage of the production mode that can be reached can be determined.

  (4) For example, when the variable display is determined to be the jackpot display result, it is determined that the automatic continuous hit is made based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when it is determined to shift to the special development effect. Then, within the operation effective period, the meter value is controlled so that the meter value exceeds the level L5 and can reach MAX as shown in (h), so that the interest of the player who makes automatic hits is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Next, a variation pattern used in the feature units 261F to 263F will be described. FIG. 22C is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a table format. The variation pattern described below is designated by a variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 when variable display is executed.

  In FIG. 22C, a normal state deviation time determination table is shown in (a), and a short time state deviation time determination table is shown in (b). Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 22-3 (a) to (d) is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  “Normal reach” in each table of FIG. 22-3 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform particularly flashy effects when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached. In addition, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. “Super reach” is a variation pattern with a long variation time compared to “normal reach”. Four types of fluctuation patterns are set for Super Reach, and the expectation of big hit (possibility of big hit is likely to be 1st Super Reach <2nd Super Reach <3rd Super Reach <4th Super Reach) ) Is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) that shifts to the probability variation state.

  Next, a development effect selection table used for selecting and determining whether or not to make a transition to the special development effect in the meter effect at the time of determining the big hit will be described. FIG. 22-4 is a diagram illustrating the special development effect selection table in a table format. The special development effect selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

  The special development effect selection table includes the third special reach special development effect selection table in FIG. 22-4 (A) and the fourth special reach special development effect selection table in FIG. 22-4 (B). ing. The special development effect selection table for the third special reach is used when the third super reach is executed. The special development effect selection table for the fourth special reach is used when the fourth super reach is executed.

  In the special development effect selection tables of FIGS. 22-4 (A) and (B), a random number SR2 for determining the special development effect selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120 (numerical range of 0 to 99). Are assigned to the decision that the special development effect can be selected and the decision that the other development effect cannot be selected. For SR2, the number of assigned random number SR2 values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4 (A), the special development effect is set such that “selectable <not selectable” is established according to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio at which selection cannot be made is higher. On the other hand, in the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-4 (B), the special relationship is set so that “selectable> not selectable” is established according to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio at which the development effect can be selected is higher.

  As a result, the fourth super reach, which has a high expectation level for a big hit, is more likely to be selected to execute the special development effect than the third super reach. Can increase the player's expectation of In addition, when the special development effect is not executed because there is a possibility that the execution of the special development effect may be selected both when the decision to win is made and when the decision to lose the game is made It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Note that the selection determination as to whether or not the special development effect can be selected may be executed only when a big hit is made. At that time, when the special development effect is executed, it is determined that a jackpot display result is obtained, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, the development effect pattern selection table used for selecting and determining the effect pattern of the development effect of the meter effect will be described. FIG. 22-5 is a diagram illustrating the developed effect pattern selection table in a table format. The development effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

  The development effect pattern selection table includes a development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (A), and a special development at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (B). Development effect pattern selection table when the effect can be selected, development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected during the fourth special reach of FIG. 22-5 (C), and fourth special reach of FIG. 22-5 (D). A time development effect pattern selection table is included.

  The development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the third special reach is used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected by the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach. The development effect pattern selection table when the third special reach special development effect can be selected is used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in the third special reach special development effect selection table.

  The development effect pattern selection table when the fourth special reach special development effect cannot be selected is used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table. The 4th special reach special development effect selectable development effect pattern selection table is used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table.

  In the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), a random number SR3 (numerical range of 0 to 59) for determining the development effect pattern as one of the random numbers updated by the CPU 120 for effect control. Are assigned to a plurality of types of development effect patterns. For SR3, the number of assigned random number SR3 values is shown for clarity of explanation. In each development effect pattern, a combination of a self-strike effect pattern that is executed when self-attack is performed and an auto-strike effect pattern that is executed when auto-strike is performed is set. A combination is selected.

  First, a table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (A) in which the special development effect cannot be selected, the self-striking effect pattern in which the meter level becomes the maximum L5 due to repeated hits and the meter level is repeatedly hit. The effect pattern A1 composed of a combination of auto repetitive effect patterns that shift to the first development effect with a maximum of L5, the self-strike effect pattern that shifts to the second development effect with the meter level reaching a maximum of L10, and the meter level The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “A1> A2” with respect to the effect pattern A2 formed by a combination of auto-striking effect patterns that becomes L5 at the maximum by repeated hits and shifts to the first development effect.

  In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (B) in which the special development effect can be selected, the same effect pattern as the effect pattern B1 and the effect pattern A2 in which the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern A1 is set is set. For the effect pattern B2 and the effect pattern B3 that automatically becomes MAX after the meter level reaches L10 as a result of repeated hits and shifts to the special development effect, the data is set to have a magnitude relationship of “B1> B2> B3”. Is set.

  Next, a table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (C) in which the special development effect cannot be selected, the effect pattern C1 in which the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern A1 is set and the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern A2 are displayed. Concerning the set effect pattern C2, the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “C1 <C2” contrary to the developed effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (A).

  In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (D) in which the special development effects can be selected, the same effect patterns as the effect patterns D1 and effect patterns A2 and B2 in which the effect patterns similar to the effect patterns A1 and B1 are set. In contrast to the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (B), “D1 <D2 <D3” is applied to the effect pattern D2 in which the effect pattern D2 is set and the effect pattern D3 in which the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern B3 is set. The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “

  In the case of self-strike, in the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), when the special development effect cannot be selected for the third super reach, the meter level is the maximum from L5 to the first. If the meter level is set to be higher than the rate at which the meter level is shifted from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum, and the special development effect can be selected, the data is set so as to have the reverse ratio relationship. Is set.

  Further, in the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), in the case of self-strike, when the special development effect cannot be selected for the fourth super reach, the meter level is set to the maximum from L5. When the meter level is set lower than the rate at which the meter level shifts from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum and the special development effect can be selected, the reverse ratio relationship is established. Data is set.

  In the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), in the case of self-strike, when the special development effect can be selected, the fourth super reach is more than the third super reach. Data is set so that the ratio of transition from the meter level MAX to the special development effect increases. In addition, the fourth super reach has a higher expectation of being a big hit than the third super reach.

  With such a setting, in the case of self-strike, the expectation level that is a big hit is set to the relationship of “first development effect <second development effect <special development effect”, so the level of the meter value increases. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In the case of automatic continuous hitting, when the special development effects cannot be selected for each of the third super reach and the fourth super reach in the development effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), the meter level Data is set so that, when only the effect that shifts from L5 to the first development effect is selected and the special development effect can be selected, the effect that shifts from the meter level MAX to the special development effect can be selected.

  With such a setting, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is set to the relationship of “first development effect <special development effect”, so as the meter level increases, the player Can increase the expectation of the big hit. And, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the meter level is less likely to rise than in the case of self-strike hitting, but at a predetermined rate, it is possible to select an effect that shifts from the meter level MAX to the special development effect. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  FIG. 22-6 is a flowchart showing the continuous hit effect setting process. The repeated hitting effect setting process is a process executed in the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process.

  Whether or not the third super reach is designated for the variable display to be executed this time by checking the variation pattern command received at the start of the current variable display based on the data in the command reception buffer in the repeated hitting effect setting process. It is determined whether or not (261FS001). This is because, in the present embodiment, the meter effect is executed in the variation pattern of the third super reach and the fourth super reach as described above.

  When the third super reach is designated for the current variable display, the random development SR2 data for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the special development effect selection table for the third special reach shown in FIG. By using it, it is determined whether the special development effect can be selected or not (261FS002).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not it has been decided in 261FS002 that a special development effect can be selected (261FS003). When it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected by the confirmation at 261FS003, the random number SR3 data for the selection of the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (A) Using the development effect pattern selection table when the development effect cannot be selected, the effect pattern of the self-strike and auto-strike continuous striking effects is selected and determined (261FS004), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. Data for setting the timing of the operation effective period is included in the effect pattern of the self-strike and automatic repetitive strike effects.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected by confirmation in 261FS003, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (B). Using the development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected, the effect pattern of the self-strike and auto-strike continuous striking effects is selected and determined (261FS005), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

  If the current fluctuation is not the third super reach according to the above-described 261FS001, it is determined whether or not the fourth super reach is designated for the variable display executed this time (261FS006).

  When the third super reach is designated for the current variable display, the random development SR2 data for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. Using, it is selected and determined whether the special development effect can be selected or not (261FS006).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not it has been decided in 261FS006 that a special development effect can be selected (261FS008). When it is determined by the confirmation at 261FS008 that the special development effect cannot be selected, random number SR3 data for selection of the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-5 (C) Using the development effect pattern selection table when the development effect cannot be selected, the effect pattern of the self-strike and auto-strike continuous striking effects is selected and determined (261FS009), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. On the other hand, when it is determined by the confirmation at 261FS008 that the special development effect can be selected, the random number SR3 data for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and in the fourth special reach of FIG. 22-5 (D). Using the development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected, the effect pattern of the self-strike and auto-strike repeated striking effects is selected and determined (261FS010), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

  When the current fluctuation is not the fourth super reach according to the above-described 261FS006, it is determined whether or not the second super reach is designated for the variable display executed this time (261FS011).

  When the second super reach is designated for the current variable display, it is determined to execute a plurality of specific image display effect patterns described later with reference to FIG. 22-9 (261FS012). Then, by setting data for executing the determined multiple specific image display effect pattern, the multiple specific image display effect pattern is set (261F014), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first super reach is specified, the process is ended in order to set the effect in the setting process other than the continuous hit effect setting process.

  In 261FS013, based on the determination of the effect pattern in 261FS004, 261FS005, 261FS009, and 261FS010, data for executing the determined effect pattern is set, thereby setting the repeated hit effect pattern (261F013) and the process is ended. . In this way, in the consecutive hit effect process, when the repeat pattern of the consecutive hit effect is set, the repeated hit effect with the set effect pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 22-1, for example.

  FIG. 22-7 is a flowchart showing the continuous hit effect process. The continuous hit effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172) in the effect control process.

  In the continuous hit effect process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the effect pattern set in the continuous hit effect setting process of FIG. 22-1 (261FS021). Whether or not the operation is valid is determined in the effect pattern set in the continuous impact effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Confirm based on whether the operation is valid.

  If the operation is not valid in 261FS021, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation is valid at 261FS021, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B is operated based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the push sensor 35B (261FS022). When the push button 31B is not operated, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is operated, it is determined whether or not a long press operation in which the operation of the push button 31B is continuously performed is executed (261FS023).

  When the long press operation is not performed in 261FS023, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of self-strike set in 261FS013 of the continuous hit effect setting process is executed (261FS026). , Proceed to 261FS027. As a result, when an effect pattern of a continuous hit effect is set in the hit effect setting process 261FS013, if a self-attack is performed within the operation effective period during variable display, among the set effect patterns, a self-attack effect is set. Meter production with a pattern is executed.

  On the other hand, when the long press operation is executed in 261FS023, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition such that the long press operation continuation period is, for example, 1 second or more is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (261FS024). When the automatic continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the automatic continuous hit execution condition is satisfied, the meter effect corresponding to the automatic repeat effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the continuous hit effect setting process is executed (261FS025), and the process proceeds to 261FS027. As a result, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in the continuous hit effect setting process 261FS013, when the automatic repeat hit is executed within the operation effective period during the variable display, the automatic hit effect of the set effect pattern is set. Meter production with a pattern is executed.

  In 261FS025, the predetermined time interval at which it is determined that continuous hitting has been executed by automatic continuous hitting is longer than the time interval at which it is determined in 261FS026 that self hitting has been executed (see FIG. 22-2). Thereby, the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the automatic repeated hitting is controlled to be slower than the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the self hitting.

  In 261FS027, for example, it is determined whether or not an effect development condition is established in the effect pattern of self-strike or auto-attack effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the consecutive hit effect setting process (261FS027). In this case, when the effect development condition is satisfied, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is the development timing of the self-strike effect pattern or the automatic repeat effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the hit effect setting process. That is, the meter display has reached the meter level necessary for the development of the direct-hit effect pattern or the automatic-hit effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the hit effect setting process.

  If it is not at the time when the effect development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect development condition is established in 261FS027, the level of the meter display of the current meter image 261F001 is the level necessary for the transition to the development effect in the currently executed effect pattern (the first development effect transition). It is determined whether or not the meter display level for performing the development effect is insufficient by checking whether or not the time has reached level L5 at the time, and level L10 at the time of transition to the second development effect (261FS028). ).

  If the meter display level is not insufficient in 261FS028, the process proceeds to 261FS010 described later. On the other hand, when the meter display level is not insufficient in 261FS028, a meter display adjustment effect is executed (261FS029), and the process proceeds to 261FS010. The meter display adjustment effect is a display that compensates for the shortage of the meter display level described above. The meter display is changed to level L5 at the time of transition to the first development effect, and the meter display is changed to level L10 at the time of transition to the second development effect. It is an effect to adjust the level. Thereby, when shifting to the development effect, the effect shifts after reaching the maximum level of the meter display determined corresponding to each development effect. Then, an effect that develops to an effect that is set in advance with the effect pattern that is currently being executed is executed (261FS030). Thereby, the transition to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect as shown in FIG. 22-1 is performed. Thereafter, the process ends.

<Example of meter display adjustment according to the operation different from repeated hitting>
Next, when the meter display adjustment effect is executed in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7, the effect that finally causes the meter display to reach a specific stage (level L5, level L10, etc.) of the meter level corresponding to the type of the developed effect Is based on the fact that a specific operation different from the continuous hitting of the push button 31B by the player, such as a tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, is detected when the display mode of the meter display has not reached the specific stage. An example will be described in which an effect of changing the display mode of the meter display can be executed with a higher degree of change than the change level of the display mode of the meter display according to the player's repeated hits.

  FIG. 22-8 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example in which the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the player executing a specific action different from the continuous hitting. 22-8 corresponds to the operation of the stick controller 31A when, for example, the effect pattern B3 (meter level L10 → MAX + special development effect) is executed among the effect effects of the meter effect shown in FIG. 22-5. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows the example by which the meter display adjustment effect was performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22-8 (A), when the effect development condition of the effect pattern B3 is satisfied, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 is insufficient compared to the level L10 that is predetermined as the meter level before the development to the special development effect ( Level L5). In such a case, a meter display adjustment effect for adjusting the meter level to the level L10 is executed as in 261FS030 of FIG. 22-7. As another example of this meter display adjustment effect, as shown in FIGS. 22-8 (B) and (C), the stick controller 31A as an operation detecting means capable of performing a specific operation different from the push button 31B to be continuously hit is operated. The meter display adjustment effect may be executed so that the meter level is adjusted to the level L10 when the operation (operation) of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

  As shown in FIG. 22-8 (B), the meter display adjustment effect is started on the condition that the meter display is insufficient when the effect development condition is satisfied, and the stick controller image 261F003 imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed. Thereby, the suggestion effect which suggests operation (action | movement) of 31 A of stick controllers by a player is performed. And if operation (action | movement) of the stick controller 31A by a player is detected within the period when such a suggestion effect is performed, as shown to FIG. 22-8 (C), the meter of the meter image 261F001 will be shown. The meter display adjustment is performed so that the display increases to a level L10 determined as a level at which the display shifts to the development effect in this example.

  In the example of FIG. 22-8, the stick controller 31A has been described as an operation detecting unit capable of performing a specific operation as a condition for executing the meter display adjustment effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotary jog controller, etc. Any motion detection means may be used as long as the motion detection means can perform a specific motion different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit.

  Further, when the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the motion detection of the motion detection means capable of a specific motion different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit, the meter display is performed in a plurality of stages by detecting one motion (operation). The level of the meter display may be increased, and the level of the meter display may be increased so as to eliminate the insufficient level at once by detecting one operation (operation).

  As shown in FIG. 22-8, when the specific condition that the meter display is insufficient when the effect development condition is satisfied is satisfied, in the meter effect, an effect mode such as the display of the meter value in the meter display finally. When a meter display adjustment effect is made to reach a specific stage, even if the level level of the meter display changes too much, the meter display effect is based on the detection of a specific action that is different from the continuous hit by the player Due to the effect of changing the aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to produce a sense of incongruity in the effect of changing the effect aspect of the meter display.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 262F]
Next, the feature part 262F will be described. As the characteristic part 262F, the player's motion is detected for a plurality of specific images that can suggest that the player's motion can be detected a plurality of times within the operation effective period in order to promote the player's motion. Based on this, a description will be given of a multiple specific image display effect that increases the number of specific images displayed as the detection valid period elapses when one specific image can be deleted.

  FIG. 22-9 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the multiple specific image display effect. 22-9 shows the effect during variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol, but from the viewpoint of preventing the complication of the drawing, the image showing the variable display of decorative symbols is omitted. ing. As described above, the multiple specific image display effect is an effect that is executed with an effect pattern set in, for example, 261FS011 and 261FS014 of FIG. 22-6. The multiple specific image display effect is executed during variable display based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), the multiple specific image display effect is executed after the SP reach notification image 261F0005 for notifying that SP reach is executed at the start of SP reach (super reach). Is done.

  In the multiple specific image display effect, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in the horizontal format at the bottom of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B), the specific button image 261F010, which is an image simulating the push button 31B, is obtained from the specific display area such as the center in the display area of the image display device 5 with the specific image. As shown in FIGS. 22-9 (B) to (E), the display of a plurality of specific button images 261F010 is sequentially displayed and moved radially from the center toward the outside as time passes. Execute in the production mode. Thereby, the display number of the specific button image 261F010 is increased as the operation effective period elapses.

  When the multiple specific image display effect is executed, a button image 261F002 composed of an image imitating the push button 31B and a character image of “continuous hit!” And an operation at the corner of the display area of the image display device 5 An effective period image 261F004 is displayed. By such display of the button image 261F002 and display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 that are displayed in an increased manner, the player's operation of operating the push button 31B (continuous hitting) is promoted. Then, by displaying a plurality of specific button images 261F010, it can be suggested that a plurality of player actions can be detected within the operation effective period.

  By the player's action, operations such as self-strike and auto-strike are performed on the push button 31B, and when the operation is detected, as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (D) and (E), the detection Accordingly, an effect is performed in which one button image 261F010 is deleted in a predetermined order among the plurality of specific button images 261F010. When the specific button image 261F010 is displayed, an effect image 261F008 and a number (“10”) as a predetermined image that can specify that the specific button image 261F010 is deleted in the vicinity of the deleted specific button image 261F010. An image 261F009 is displayed. The numerical image 261F009 is also an image that suggests an increase in the meter display level by indicating the number of points where the meter display level of “10” increases by one step.

  The specific button image 261F010 that has not been erased by the player's operation is moved and displayed to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (D) and (E). The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the end of the display area is erased in such a manner as to go out of the display area. In this way, images that are erased in such a manner as to go out of the display area are excluded from the objects to be erased corresponding to the operation of the player's push button 31, thereby invalidating the player's motion detection. It becomes a target.

  Note that the specific button image 261F010 may be erased by detecting the operation of one operation by the player's operation, or may be multiple times (for example, 2-3 times) by the player's operation. One image may be deleted each time an operation is detected. Further, a plurality of images (for example, two to three images) may be deleted by detecting the operation of one operation by the player's operation.

  Data setting for executing such a plurality of specific image display effects is performed in the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process. The multiple specific image display effect during variable display is performed in the variable display effect process (S172).

By executing such a multiple specific image display effect, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) Push button 31B based on the player's action on a plurality of specific button images 261F010 that can suggest that a plurality of player actions can be detected within the operation effective period in order to promote the player's action. In the case where one specific image can be deleted based on the detected operation, the number of display of the specific button image 261F010 is increased as the operation effective period elapses, thereby improving the fun of the production. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (2) Since the plurality of specific button images 261F010 are moved and displayed after appearing and displaying, it is possible to give the player a visual impact using the specific images.

  (3) The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the outside of the display area of the image display device 5 is erased and the operation of the push button 31B by the player's action is invalidated, so that in the display area of the image display device 5 It is possible to prevent the specific button image 261F010 from being displayed excessively.

  (4) In the vicinity of the specific button image 261F010 deleted in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation, as a predetermined image that can specify that the specific image has been deleted, an effect image 261F008 and a number ( “10”) By displaying the image 261F009, it is possible to make it possible for the player to recognize which specific button image 261F010 has been deleted.

  (5) In the image display device 5, when the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 is started from the specific display area such as the center of the display area, the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 has regularity. Thus, the effect of displaying the plurality of specific button images 261F010 can be prevented from being an effect that lacks unity.

[Explanation regarding feature 263F]
Next, the feature portion 263F will be described. As the feature portion 263F, when the operation effective period is displayed during the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the operation of the push button 31B due to the player's action is not detected. In the first period such as the previous period, it is considered that the player's movement has been detected after the operation effective period has elapsed, and in the second period such as the latter period, the meter effect is executed. An effect of performing the control that is restricted will be described.

  FIG. 22-10 is an effect in which the effect executed when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected within the operation effective period in the first period and the second period of the effect period during the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows production | presentation control according to the period which performs A.

  In FIG. 22-10, (A) and (B) show the effect executed in the first period, which is the first period within the effect period, and (C) to (G) indicate the second period within the effect period. An effect to be executed in a certain later stage is shown. Such period-specific effect control may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the feature part 261F, or may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the feature part 262F.

  As the effects executed in the previous period in the period-specific effects, as shown in FIGS. 22-10 (A) and (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous character image 261F006 is displayed. When the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation is detected in response to the operation promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation effective period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is determined according to the detection determination. An increasing meter effect is executed.

  As the effects executed in the previous period in the period-specific effects, as shown in FIGS. 22-10 (A) and (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous character image 261F006 is displayed. When the operation of the push button 31B by the player's action is detected in response to the action promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is changed according to the detection determination. An increasing first meter effect is executed.

  In the second meter effect executed in the previous period in the period-specific effects, the meter image 261F001 is displayed in the vertical format on the left side of the screen and the previous character image 261F007 is displayed, as in the effect shown in FIG. When the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation is detected in response to the operation promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 increases according to the detection determination. Meter production is executed.

  In the second meter effect, as shown in FIG. 22-1, it is possible to shift to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect according to the level of the meter value. However, in the second meter effect, the meter value level does not automatically change to a predetermined meter value level when the effect development condition is satisfied, but according to the meter value level at the end of the operation effective period. The first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect can be transferred.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22-10 (D), when the meter value is greater than or equal to level L5 and less than level L10 at the end of the operation effective period, an effect of shifting to the first development effect is executed. If the meter value is level L10 at the end of the operation effective period as shown in FIG. 22-10 (E), an effect of shifting to the second development effect is executed. If the meter value is level MAX at the end of the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 22-10 (F), the effect of shifting to the special development effect is executed. However, since the production by period is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns as will be described later, the meter value may reach the level L10 but not the level MAX even if high-speed continuous hitting is performed by itself. Production control is performed.

  When no operation of the push button 31B by the player's action is detected at the end of the operation effective period, control for shifting to a special effect different from the developed effect is performed as shown in FIG. 22-10 (G). It is. The special effect is an effect in which the fun of the effect is hardly felt, for example, the degree of expectation of the big hit is not suggested.

  Next, a data table used in the period-specific effect control will be described. First, in the period-specific production control, a special development production selection table similar to FIG. 22-4 is used to select and determine whether or not a special development production can be selected.

  22-11 is a diagram showing an effect pattern selection table used in the later stage of effect control by period in a table format. The effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

  The effect pattern selection table includes an effect pattern selection table when the third special reach special development effect cannot be selected in FIG. 22-11 (A) and a third special reach special development effect selection shown in FIG. 22-11 (B). Effect pattern selection table when possible, effect pattern selection table when impossible to select special development effect at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-11 (C), and special development effect at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-11 (D). A selectable effect pattern selection table is included.

  When the special development effect cannot be selected in the third special reach special development effect selection table, the special development effect cannot be selected in the third special reach special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4 (A). Used. The third special reach special development effect selectable effect pattern selection table is used when it is determined in the third special reach special development effect selection table in FIG. 22-4 that the special development effect can be selected.

  When the fourth special reach special development effect cannot be selected, the effect pattern selection table is selected when the special development effect cannot be selected in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table of FIG. 22-4 (B). Used. The effect pattern selection table when the fourth special reach special development effect can be selected is used when the special development effect is determined to be selectable in the fourth special reach special development effect selection table.

  In the effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 22-11 (A) to (D), a random number SR4 (0 to 119) for determining the effect pattern selection in the later period in the effect by period as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. 120 numerical values) are allocated to a plurality of types of late stage production patterns. For SR4, the number of assigned random number SR4 values is shown for clarity of explanation. In each effect pattern, the same effect pattern is set when the self-attack is made and when the auto-attack is made, and such an effect pattern is selected.

  First, a table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (A) used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected, the meter level becomes the minimum L0 to the maximum L10 by repeated hits, and the meter at the end of the operation effective period Only the effect pattern a that can be shifted to the special effect, the first development effect, or the second development effect is selected according to the value. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (B) used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected, the same effect pattern b1 as the effect pattern a and the meter level is set to the minimum L0 by repeated hitting. Depending on the meter value at the end of the operation effective period, L10 is the maximum, and any one of the special effect, the first development effect, the second development effect, or the effect pattern b2 that can be shifted to the special development effect is selected. The For the effect pattern b1 and the effect pattern b2, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “b1> b2.”

  Next, a table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (C) used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected, only the effect pattern c that is the same as the effect pattern a is selected. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (D) used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected, the same effect pattern c1 as the effect pattern b1 and the same effect pattern c2 as the effect pattern b2 Is selected. For the effect pattern c1 and the effect pattern c2, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “c1 <c2”. In addition, the fourth super reach has a higher expectation of being a big hit than the third super reach.

  With such a setting, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is set to the relationship of “first development effect, second development effect <special development effect”, so as the meter value level increases, The expectation for jackpot can be raised.

  The effect pattern shown in FIG. 22-11 is set in the repeated impact effect setting process in which the effect pattern to be executed is selected and set by the same process as in FIG. 22-6 executed in the variable display start setting process in S171. Is done.

  FIG. 22-12 is a flowchart showing the second continuous striking effect process. The second continuous hit effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172) in the effect control process process, and is a process of executing an effect in the latter effect pattern in the effect by period. In the variable display effect process (S172), the effect in the previous period effect pattern in the period-specific effect is executed by the first repeated effect process, and the effect in the previous period effect pattern in the period-specific effect is the second consecutive effect. It is executed by processing.

  In the second consecutive striking effect process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the later stage effect pattern in the period-specific effect set in the repeated striking effect setting process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171. (261FS031). Whether or not the operation is valid is determined in the effect pattern set in the continuous impact effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Confirm based on whether the operation is valid.

  If the operation is not valid in 261FS031, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation is valid at 261FS031, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B has been operated based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the push sensor 35B (261FS032). When the push button 31B is not operated, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is being operated, it is determined whether or not a long press operation in which the push button 31B is continuously operated is being executed (261FS033).

  When the long press operation is not performed in 261FS033, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of self-strike set in the consecutive hit effect setting process is executed (261FS036), and 261FS037. Proceed to Thereby, if the self-strike is executed within the operation effective period during variable display, the meter effect in the self-strike effect pattern is executed.

  On the other hand, when the long press operation is executed in 261FS033, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition such that the long press operation continuation period is, for example, 1 second or more is established. It is determined whether or not (261FS034). When the automatic continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the automatic continuous hit execution condition is satisfied, a meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of automatic continuous hit is executed (261FS035), and the process proceeds to 261FS037. As a result, when auto-striking is executed within the operation effective period during variable display, the meter effect in the auto-struck effect pattern is executed.

  In 261FS035, the predetermined time interval at which it is determined that continuous hitting is executed by automatic continuous hitting is longer than the time interval at which it is determined in 261FS036 that self-running hitting is executed (see FIG. 22-2). Thereby, the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the automatic repeated hitting is controlled to be slower than the change speed of the display level of the meter value corresponding to the self hitting.

  In 261FS037, for example, it is determined whether it is at the end of the operation valid period (261FS037). If it is not at the end of the operation valid period, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is at the end of the operation effective period, it is determined whether or not the condition development condition for the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect is satisfied (261FS038). In this case, when the performance development condition is satisfied, the meter value level is L5 to L9, the meter value level is L10, and the meter value level is MAX. That is.

  If it is not the time when the production development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, it is determined whether or not an operation has not been detected once during the operation valid period (261FS040). If an operation is detected one or more times during the operation valid period, the process is terminated. When no operation is detected during the operation valid period, a process for shifting to the special effect is executed (S261FS041), and the process is terminated.

By performing the control described above, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) As shown in FIG. 22-10, when the operation valid period is displayed but no operation due to the player's movement is detected, in the first period of the stage-specific effects, the player's action is displayed after the operation detection valid period has elapsed. The meter effect is executed as if an operation due to the operation was detected, but in the latter period of the effect by period, the execution of the meter effect is restricted, and the suggested effect is diverse. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (2) Execution based on the detected operation amount by the player's action by executing the development effect according to the level of the meter value as shown in (D) to (F) of FIG. The content of the effect changes by shifting from one effect to any one of a plurality of types of effect, so that the player can be promoted to operate.

  (3) As shown in (G) of FIG. 22-10, when an operation due to the player's action is not detected in the later stage of the period-specific effects, the game is changed from the current effect to the special effect. If the player does not operate, the player can be made aware of the transition to the special effect.

  (4) Next, it is longer than when the player's self-strike is detected when it is determined that the continuous strike is executed based on the automatic continuous strike determination made by S261FS035 and S261FS036 in FIG. 22-12 By assuming that the player's continuous hitting is executed at the detection interval, it is possible to promote the player who pays attention to the progress of the production such as the transition of the production by himself / herself.

[Modifications regarding the characteristic portions 261F to 263F]
(1) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect When each of the meter value levels that are the conditions for transitioning to the advanced effects is reached, a special action display is displayed on the character image that is displayed at that time. You may perform the effect which alert | reports having arrived. In that case, the higher the meter level that is the condition for transition to the development effect, the more apparently the character image operation effect mode may be.

  (2) When the meter effects as shown in FIG. 22-1, FIG. 22-8, and FIG. 22-12 are executed, like the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect When each of the meter value levels that are the conditions for transition to the advanced development is reached, a different character image is newly displayed for each level of the meter value that is the transition condition, and the character image is changed. You may perform the production | presentation which alert | reports having reached the level of the meter used as transition conditions. In that case, every time the meter value level that becomes the transition condition to the development effect is reached, the character image that is newly displayed when the meter value level that becomes the transition condition to the next development effect is reached is suggested. You may make it perform the display to perform.

  (3) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect When reaching the level of the meter value, which is a condition for transitioning to a development effect, the meter level that is a condition for transitioning to the development effect is reached, such as changing the display color of the meter image 261F001 to a special color. It is also possible to execute an effect informing the user by changing the effect mode. In that case, the higher the meter level that is the condition for transition to the development effect, the more apparently the effect mode may be.

  (4) As the meter effect described above, an example is shown in which the meter value level changes by one level in the meter image 261F001 meter display image when one operation by the player's action is detected. Not limited to this, a plurality of levels may be changed when one operation is detected. Further, the meter effect described above may be changed by one level when a plurality of operations (for example, 2-3 times) are detected.

  (5) The meter effect described above may be executed during a part of the operation effective period of the operation effective period set to the fluctuation display in the specific fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation in the specific fluctuation pattern. It may be executed during the entire operation effective period among the operation effective periods set for display.

  (6) Although the display of the operation effective period described above is performed in a meter display format such as the operation effective period image 261F004, the operation effective period may be displayed as a numerical image.

  (7) The transition to the first development effect, the transition to the second development effect, and the transition to the special development effect by the meter effect based on the operation detection by the operation of the player within the operation valid period as described above It may be possible to execute it when a self-strike operation is detected over almost the entire operation effective period, or a self-strike for a part of the operation effective period (for example, a period of 50%). It may be made executable when an operation is detected.

  (8) The transition to the first development effect, the transition to the second development effect, and the transition to the special development effect by the meter effect based on the operation detection by the operation of the player within the operation valid period as described above. In addition, it may be possible to execute when an automatic continuous hitting operation is detected over almost the entire operation effective period, and the automatic continuous hitting may be performed over a part of the operation effective period (for example, a period of 50%). It may be made executable when an operation is detected.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 Pachinko machine, 31B push button, 35B push sensor, 261F001 meter image, 5 image display device, 120 effect control CPU, 261F010 specific button image, 261F008 effect image, 261F009 numeric image.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A specific display means for displaying a specific display;
Based on the fact that a predetermined action of the player that is different from the continuous action of the player is detected by the detecting means during the detection valid period of the detecting means, a continuous action deemed determination that the continuous action is considered to be executed at a predetermined interval is performed. Action determining means for
Based on the fact that the player's continuous motion is detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is possible to execute a specific performance capable of changing the specific display performance mode in a plurality of stages according to the continuous motion. Specific production execution means,
The specific effect executing means can change the specific display effect mode in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation at the predetermined interval, based on the determination that the operation determining means regards the continuous operation. Specific production can be performed,
The specific effect executing means is configured so that the detection means performs the player's action at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous motion deemed determination than when the specific effect is performed based on the determination that the continuous motion is deemed to be determined. A gaming machine in which the specific stage in which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is higher when the specific effect is executed based on detection of a continuous motion.